Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and piping. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Germany. and plumbing fixtures. electrical panels. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. 3 . such as duct. electrical. fixtures. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Add basic MEP elements.

For example. is located and accessed in the training files location. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. however. So. When you open a training file. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. such as templates and families. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Contact your CAD manager for more information. your Training folder may be in a different location. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. when you add ductwork. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn where the training files are located.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. and tags. However. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. and sheets to document the project. On the Contents tab. After completing each exercise. For example. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Create detail views. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. as well as how to open and save them. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. When you install the training files as instructed. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Create schedules. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. to provide a richer and more finished design. templates. NOTE Depending on your installation. views. Metric: files for users working with metric units. You do not design entire systems. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. annotations. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise.

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. click ➤ Save As. 8 If you have made changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.rvt.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For File name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Files of type. enter the new file name. if you open settings. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt) is selected. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For example.rvt and make changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 4 Click the training file name. and click the Training Files icon. the Open dialog displays. and click Open. you are prompted to save the changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. verify that Project Files (*. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. 3 In the right pane. and you can open any supported file type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. scroll down. and click Save. double-click Imperial or Metric.

6 .

Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. ■ ■ 7 . As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawings. In the Revit MEP model. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. schedules. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the floor or roof remains connected. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. hence. drawing sheets. every drawing sheet. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. If the length of the elevation is changed. the parameter is one of association or connection. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and plans. quantities. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. scope. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If you move the partition. sections. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved.

Examples include detail lines. dimensions. and reference planes are datum elements. Datum elements help to define project context. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and electrical panels. When you change something. and 2D detail components. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. grids.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sprinklers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. boilers. sinks. filled regions. and electrical panels. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They help to describe or document the design. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. boilers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. For example. For example. levels. tags. sprinklers. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sinks. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. They display in relevant views of the design. ducts. walls and ceilings are hosts.

Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. floors. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. for example. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. To place levels. programming is not required. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you must be in a section or elevation view. from geometry to construction data. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Project: In Revit MEP. For example. If you can draw. and so forth). they are implied by what you do and how you draw. schedules. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and drawings of the design. elevation views. Most often. In Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and types. or bottom of foundation. top of wall. Often. and ceilings. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. The project file contains all information for the building design. section views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. such as roofs. In other cases. North . By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. families. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. However. you do nothing to establish these relationships. views of the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.

Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. System families can be transferred between projects. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Unlike system and standard component families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). showing. For example. identical use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include ducts. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as a 30” X 42” title block. For example. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. With a few clicks. hiding. A type can also be a style. and similar graphical representation. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. and wires. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can also display several project views at one time. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). However. pipes. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A type can be a specific size of a family. Then experiment with them. Type: Each family can have several types. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To return the panel to the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.

data and systems. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. select the tool first. tools used for editing existing elements. and for switching views. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.. project and system parameters. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and settings. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for running analysis on the current design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and CAD files. architect-specific tools.. When working on the Modify tab. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.

By default. For example. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. when adding duct. provides requested information. displays frequently used tools. closes the application menu (double-click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools.

select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Export) On the application menu.. click.. (Save As) export the current drawing.

(Print) access product and license information.. or template file... synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.On the application menu. Camera. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Publish) print the current drawing. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. to. provides views including Default 3D. or template file.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . click. family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. annotation. To enable or disable a tool item. saves a current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. and Walkthrough. but is not enabled by default. (Licensing) close the file. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.

a tool tip appears next to the cursor.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are highlighting an element or component. This displays the command history in a list. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. check the Status Bar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In addition. Clipboard. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. To show the Status Bar again. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. However. or the Family Editor. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Starting with the most recent command. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Modify. repeat the command. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. To hide the Status Bar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Group. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. when you switch to another editing mode. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.

click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .To cancel or exit the current command. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Place a Wall. for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. select one or more elements of the same category. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.

1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.rvt. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.

click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. To modify or add snap increments. click . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Modifying the View | 19 . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 6 Click in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. on the Navigation bar.

Click and drag to orbit the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. moving the wheel to the desired location. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and click tin the Options dialog. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. ➤ Options. click the SteeringWheels tab. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. To define settings for SteeringWheels.

and select the duct. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and open Level 2 . 2 Enter ZR. bottoms. Small blue dots.HVAC Plan . called drag controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display along the ends. as shown. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.

Move. In this example. select the first item in the list. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. or press CTRL+Z. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Some commands.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. After selecting the element to move. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. such as the Modify Ducts command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 14 Enter VG.Return. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. Press ESC twice.Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Select Mechanical .End a command Some commands. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

and click Open. settings. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Template file. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. under Create new. you learn how to start a project from a template. and loadable families. such as coordination review and interference checking. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation.rte template. use copy/monitor. In that case. Finally. and modify system settings. such as ducts and pipes. You can choose from several templates. the default building levels and standard views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. 5 In the New Project dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. create and manage views. 6 Click OK. click Training files. link files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 27 . New projects inherit all the families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. system families. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. click Browse. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. In the Choose Template dialog. When you select the material. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 10 Using the same method. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Click OK twice. Click OK. ■ ■ Under Create new. 8 In the drawing area. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. For Location. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Manchester. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. For example.7 In the Project Browser. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. review the construction materials listed. click Edit. create another new project using the Construction template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select School or University. under Energy Analysis.rte template and click Open. click (Browse). select Project template. navigate to Imperial Templates. and open North. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. (Browse). you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. NH. If you want to use a template other than the default. for City. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Cancel. select Level 1. ■ For Building Construction.

After standard settings have been established for an organization. for 3 1/2". Click OK twice. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Wiring. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 4 1/2". 26 In the right pane. 27 Click OK. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. under Duct Settings. For Categories. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and 5 1/2". power distribution systems. and fire protection systems. for 3/4". 23 In the left pane. Holding CTRL. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 10 1/2". 24 In the right pane. select Views. for 3 1/2". select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 33 Click OK. and 12 1/2".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Round. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Sizes. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.rfa and click Open. 22 In the right pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Rectangular. 4 1/2". 5 1/2". 11 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. wiring. piping. plumbing. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Identity Data. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Pipe Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and demand factors for electrical systems. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.

34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Training. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . To enable this coordination. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. For Then by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 4 In the New Project dialog. 38 Close the file. under Template file. In addition. Click Open. and groups that are contained in a project.Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 5 Click OK. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Family and Type. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. From the Positioning list.rvt. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. You need to create the MEP model for the project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. under Create new. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select View Name. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Linking Projects In this exercise. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Ascending Click OK twice. families. select Sub-Discipline. select Associated Level. click Browse. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. sheets. select Auto . You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Then by. For Sort by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click the My Library icon. and click Open. ➤ Open. and click (Browse). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 15 Under Library Name. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and change the name to My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families. click My Library. click (Add Value). templates. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. Save. and click OK twice.

you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 23 Click 24 Click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Click ➤ Options. If you work in a large office. and decal image files. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. specify the new location here. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 11 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 22 Select My Library. custom color files. such as bump maps. 27 Click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. view the current path. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 9 In the text editor. 19 Click Cancel. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. 21 On the File Locations tab. This path is determined during installation. 3 Under Settings. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Places.

25 Close the file without saving it. In this exercise. you modify snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. you modify snap settings. 19 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.. click the Spelling tab. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. and enter 1 .17 In the Spelling dialog. under Template file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog.rte. 23 In the text editor. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can turn snap settings on and off. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 22 In the text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU. under Dimension Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. work with snapping turned off. As you zoom in and out within a view. 20 Under Settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 24 In the Options dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Browse. click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. click Close. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.

deselect Chain. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. enter SM. use the wheel button on your mouse. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. While sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. If it does not. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . This is the increment that you added previously. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. For example.

Do not set the wall end point.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. 26 Close the file. with or without saving it. and delete the value 1’ . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. and specify the wall endpoint. and the wall edges. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it will snap to the endpoints. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 25 Click OK. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that snapping is once again active. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. At the end of the tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. and then you create a plenum level. If the tutorial training files are not present. methodology. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you will understand the process.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. go to http://www. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. In this exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. duct system and a hydronic piping system. In this lesson. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the mechanical system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. After applying a color scheme to the zones. 45 . you first configure the linked architectural model. you first plan the system. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work.

This makes the architectural components (such as walls. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Room Bounding. click to select it. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add a level for plenums. roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Next. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and after the linked model highlights. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. ceilings. In this section. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE When working with a linked file. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. under Constraints. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP training file. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.

and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. 9 On the Draw panel. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. enter 8'. For Offset. and double-click West . Click Plan View Types. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Preparing Spaces | 47 . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).MEP. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and click OK. The new level is placed. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).6 In the Project Browser. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).

In the next exercise. and click Properties. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for View Range. Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. enter an Offset of 1' 0".Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under View Depth. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select Level Above (Level 3). This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter 0. for Top. Under Extents. and click Apply Default View Template. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 In the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Level.Plenum. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and for Offset. select Design. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. select Plenum Plan. click Edit. For Sub-Discipline. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. However. For View Classification. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Default View Template. you can choose to save your work. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Cut plane. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. select MEP . In this exercise. In this exercise. for View Scale. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. ■ Click OK twice.

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Upper Limit. select New. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For (Tag Location). This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Horizontal. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Placing Spaces | 49 .Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum.

10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ensuring coordination between the files. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. enter 219. 14 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter Library. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the space. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space.

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Placing Spaces | 51 . 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. enter 0.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 23 Click OK. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. and then press Esc. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted.

and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. change the space number to 216A. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. which was numbered 219Q. 9 In the floor plan. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and press Enter. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. enter Corridor. double-click the space name. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. the plan view would have updated with the changes. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 11 Close the schedule view. as shown.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. If necessary. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. you place a space in a chase. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . For Number. select the space. Under Identity Data. and then click OK. for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. enter 225PC. select Interior and Reference. enter 0. select Roof Level. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. enter 4'. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. In the plan view. 10 In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. For Offset. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. expand Spaces. enter Chase. right-click. 12 Click in the section view. For Limit Offset. 6 Enter VG. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

All spaces in the view are tagged. and click OK. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and maximize the view. select Space Tag With Volume.Space Plan. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. floors. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Loaded Tags. In the next exercises. 17 Type ZF. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.

The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. In this exercise. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. which removes the space from the Default zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.rvt. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . click View ➤ Zones. To display space reference lines. click Reference. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After a space is placed in an area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.

indicating that the space is occupiable. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning is highlighted. Using the Edit Zone tab. and verify the zones in the System Browser. and Electrical 220 spaces. Instruction 221. You work with a single zone until you click Finish.5 In the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to zones in the building. select Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. Next. The Zone tool is active. you assign spaces to a zone. under Energy Analysis. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. you can add or remove a space from the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and a new zone is created. The graphic in the System Browser updates. under Spaces. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.rvt. To display space reference lines. and modify the zone properties. As you do this. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and click OK. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. select HVAC Zones. Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active.In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . To view the zone in the drawing area. type VG. Instruction. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

and click OK. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. You activated zone visibility in the views. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. expand 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Training Files. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Reference. for Name. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Area B.West . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. under Spaces.Zoning. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.West . enter 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 9 In the System Browser.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. under Identity Data. To display space reference lines. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 11 Close the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

Verify that the distance is 1/2". 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. zoom out.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning floor plan. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning view.Zoning view to activate it. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Select Attached End.5 Click in the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Front.Zoning to make it the active view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.rvt. and click OK. click Training Files. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. In this exercise. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. for Name Value. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. click the corner where the Top. on the ViewCube. enter Lounge . double-click the zone tag. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.East. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . space. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and zone information. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. you verify the building.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. Click (Highlight). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected. click (Isolate). you isolate the space.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge.

Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. select 1_South_Lounge. scroll down in the left pane. and then click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. click . click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). For Electrical Loads. click . select Lounge/Recreation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For People. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and then click OK.■ On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ ■ Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Construction Type. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. select 109 Lounge. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.

10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. click (Shading). verify that 74. For Heating Information. floors. and humidification set point. heating air temperature. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. the zone information displays for the selected zone. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and dehumidification set point. and other room-bounding components. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. cooling air temperature. roofs. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This indicates the heating set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. Next.00 °F : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that 70. and air changes per hour. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : 54. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Cooling Information.00 °F : 90. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.

68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Level 3. For Name. open MEP . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. For Offset. Under Energy Analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. click Cancel. for Number. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 212P. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

double-click Level 2 . and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . click Edit. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. you verified building. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. NH. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. is selected. under Energy Analysis. click Training Files. In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and select space Plenum 212P. click in the Value field. verify that Manchester. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.rvt. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. for Energy Data. enter 03101. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for City. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and zone information.Space Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. select School or University. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. On the Place tab. For Location. For Postal Code. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Heated and cooled. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click OK. and then click . ft. you need to select this option. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Click OK twice. select Specified. and click OK. select Library . and click Element Properties. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. under Volume Computations. For Export Complexity. click Edit. For Condition Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. both. right-click. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Level 1 is selected. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Space Type. In order to select a space. Select Area per person.Audio Visual. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that 1' 0" is specified. and click OK. verify that New Construction is selected. For Sensible. For Ground Plane. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. for Building Service. verify that Occupiable is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that <Building> is specified. a cooling load. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). click in the Value column.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. or neither. For People. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Values. select space Library 219. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Project Phase. and enter 50 sq. For Latent. select Specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). If. ■ On the Weather tab. For Building Construction. 8 In the drawing area. enter 200 Btu/h. for Values. enter 150 Btu/h.

For Electrical Loads. click Calculate. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select 219 Library. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. NH. and can be modified here. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. For Building Construction. For Building Service. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. For Location. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that <Building> is specified. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ Click OK. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that School or University is selected. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. is specified. select Actual. Select the space associated with the warning. click Information). for Values. verify that Manchester. There should be no warnings displayed. You have verified the building information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click Edit. Next. and click OK. Under Power.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Review the loads report for project. 19 In the drawing area. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 3 In the drawing area. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. select HVAC Zones. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. In this exercise.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. For Color Scheme. or zone information. weather. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 21 Click OK. and a loads report displays. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and zone information for the building model.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or make any changes to the model. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 17 In the loads report. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. in 1-ton increments. under Schemes. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range. and click OK. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercise. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Select Schedule building components. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In this exercise. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. for Select available fields from. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. For Name. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. click Training Files. select Spaces. more category options are available.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select New Construction.12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.rvt. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and Blank line. For Formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Fields. select Not Between. and then select Hidden field. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select HVAC. Header. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Level.■ Under Available fields. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. for Formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click . Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. click (Browse). select Airflow Delta. select Number. and then click Conditional Format. For Discipline. In the Schedule Properties dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Then by. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. Select Ascending. ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter . select Level. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Air Flow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Click OK. and click OK. For Type.

In the next lesson. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. right-click to access schedule properties. In later exercises. verify that Show is highlighted. click the color swatch. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. select red. Under Conditions to Use. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ For Value. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. For Background Color. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In this exercise. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.

78 .

you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will create supply air systems. After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. After system creation. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Then. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. and scroll to space 223. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the ceiling view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.

19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 17 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. click Place on Face. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. as shown. and then press Esc to end the command. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. verify that Constrain is cleared. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and press Enter. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. type 12. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. If the host element is modified or moved. 9 On the Placement panel. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Rectangular Face Round Neck . enter 425 CFM. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select Supply Diffuser .

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the drawing area. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.rfa. click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. clear Leader. 28 On the Placement tab. click Yes.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select one of the diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. as shown. 22 In the drawing area. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and click Open. Next. 27 Select Return Diffuser .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 In the Open dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.

select one of the return diffusers. and click to select the lines. 31 In the alert dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. under Other. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 .Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and click OK. for Reference. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. click Yes. Level.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and click OK. For the start point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. ■ ■ For the end point. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click the Level 1 line.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset.

When you highlight a space. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.Press Esc. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. right-click the title. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design is highlighted. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. You then create the logical connection between the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click View ➤ Systems.HVAC Plan . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including energy analysis. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the space crossing lines display. However. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and Flow value. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. review the Number of Elements. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 15 Click Cancel. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. the number of elements is updated. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. As you add diffusers to systems. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 12 In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 .IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 6 Keep the System Browser open. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. On the Options Bar. Connect Into. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. System Name.

highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 18 Click OK. Rename the system Next. 22 Click OK. 25 Click OK. and the system connects them. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. for Mark. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. which updates the name in the System Browser. In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. the air terminals are the children. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). under Identity Data. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name.

and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and display solution 1. 4 In the drawing area. which provides various layout tools. select the upper left diffuser. select Network. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. for Solution Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. In this case. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. A Generate Layout tab displays. click Training Files. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Also. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the Network type provides several solutions. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .

Select Branch. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Settings. For Duct Type.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type.Round. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 9' 10 1/2". If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as shown. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 3'. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Offset. Click OK. click Modify.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example.

select Duct Color Fill . press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select By View. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. The first time you press Tab. a disconnection exists. and click OK. Usually. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. for Color Scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and then click OK. fittings. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. If the entire network does not highlight. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. under Graphics. highlight a segment of the main duct. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click to select it. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . thus it is not part of the system. you can verify connectivity as you create a system.Flow. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Values Displayed. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and equipment. but not all values are used in this view. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.

20 In the drawing area. and press Enter. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes.Velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select one of the diffusers in the system. under Mechanical . select Duct Color Fill .Airflow. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select the color scheme legend. and then press Esc to clear the selection. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and on the Options Bar. for Flow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 26 Click OK.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Friction. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The ductwork and fittings are updated. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Branch Sizing. and drag it to the right. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. highlight a segment of the duct. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and then click to select it. and select 16". Select the upper segment of main duct. Click OK. click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Under Constraints. Select Only. and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. Select Restrict Height.08 in-wg/100ft.

Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. also known as the critical path. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.

Design is highlighted. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select the WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 15 On the ViewCube. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.3D MEP. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. select the top right diffuser. and click Draw Duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Front. 14 In the Project Browser. NOTE When drawing duct. right-click the connector grip. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. for Offset. select 9' 10 1/2".Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . double-click MEP .

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. it is considered a closed loop. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 22 Using the same method. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Also. The ductwork is automatically created. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc.

Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 30 Press Esc twice. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and click to select it.

under Mechanical . under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. such as a plenum. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. clear Restrict Height.Airflow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method.

you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. 109 . including 2 base mounted pumps.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. you place mechanical equipment. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Wall faces is selected.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.High Efficiency .Horizontal .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.HVAC Plan . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. in corridor 328. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Left Return .2-6 Tons . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP . 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.

and in the Type Selector.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and enter 2'. click the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown. as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 9'. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the mechanical room. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 12 GPM. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. Click OK. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Offset. Under Mechanical. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. for Water Flow.

Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including flow and pressure. you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify.

but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Unlike logical connections (systems). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 In the System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.Mech 330). indicating that it’s the active view. analyses cannot be performed. right-click the Systems column heading.HVAC Plan .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. where it is easier to review the information. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and click View ➤ Piping.

Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select the 2 WSHPs. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. for System Name. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This display indicates that the system is selected. Assigning a system component to an existing system. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that on the Options Bar. select the boiler.In the System Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Therefore. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. As you assign equipment to systems.

19 In the Project Browser.13 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 . for System Name. double-click Roof . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the cooling tower. 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.HVAC Plan . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You have created the hydronic return system. under Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design.

In heating mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. indicating the logical connection. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Select. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 In the Select Connector dialog. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In cooling mode. 28 Using the same method. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and click Expand All. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 29 Right-click CHWS. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and bypasses the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.

33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Properties. 32 In the System Browser. expand Piping. and click Column Settings. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. under Mechanical.In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. for Water Flow. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. you can view several parameters. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading.

Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. click Training Files. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A system preview displays in red. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. select Mechanical Equipment.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 10 Click OK. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. the boiler. select CHWR. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select it. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Mech 330). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. you can place the cursor over a system component. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . then the Select a System dialog displays. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. press Tab to highlight the system.

11 On the Options Bar. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select Perimeter. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . or architectural components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. enter 1' 6''. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. It does not reference the architecture. 13 Click Cancel. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. duct. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. With each Tab. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area.

24 Press Esc. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Edit System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically. On the Options Bar. which propagates flow throughout the system. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Level 1 . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Next. 27 On the System Tools panel. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. 28 In the Project Browser. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.HVAC Plan . you physically close the CHWR loop. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. under Mechanical. access its instance properties. 38 Using the same method. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. select a WSHP. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and click Cancel.

■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Slope. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0''/12''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 41 Click OK. select CHWS. and then click OK. enter 1' 6''.40 In the Select a System dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). (Both sections are at the same elevation. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . 48 While pressing Ctrl.

50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. or manually modify the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. To create the piping system. 51 Click Finish Layout. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. indicating that it’s the active view.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta. click Training Files.Design is highlighted.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the plan view. as shown. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view.

select the boiler. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. and click OK. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and click Draw Pipe. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 11 In the Select Connector dialog.

and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.In a plan view. for Offset. ■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 1' .7''. and you select 1 connector. enter 2'. and press Enter. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and click OK. and select it. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice. as shown. 19 In the plan view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . right-click the bottom connector. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 28 Press Esc. click to connect to the pump. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and when the connector point displays. you select the tee fitting.

33 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom control on the tee.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. type 1'.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Next. and click Element Properties. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. you validate the flow through the system.

as shown. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 46 Press Esc. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. for Cooling Water Flow. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). In the Instance Properties dialog. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. notice that under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. 43 Press Esc. and click OK. select the cooling tower. 40 Click Cancel. 42 Click OK. view the properties for the secondary pump. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 41 Using the same method. the value is 0 GPM. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. under Mechanical.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. right-click. Connect the cooling tower Next. When you create the pumps in parallel.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

and close the dialog. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves In this exercise. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50 In the 3D View. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.

Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. as shown. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. The bypass valve is closed by default. and select Ball Valve .HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.

validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click. 19 Using the same method.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. In heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. and click OK.

The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.rvt. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.HVAC Plan . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design is highlighted. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Initially.

for Schemes. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.Size. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 .

10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. select Friction. 13 Press Esc. Click OK. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Select And. Under Constraints. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.25 FT/100ft. and enter 2. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Branch Sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and for Velocity. and click to select the branch.

Using the System Inspector.rvt. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. or offset elevations are incorrect. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.Design ➤ 3D Views. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Inspecting the System | 149 . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.

flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them. 10 Click Finish. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. the Static Pressure is 7.88 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. and the Pressure Loss is 1. for Fluid Temperature.89 psi.67 psi. select 90° F. 9 Using the same method. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In this exercise. and to size pipe. inspect Section 6 again.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and click OK. targeting those systems that need attention.

The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. click Training Files. 9 Right-click CHWS. right-click the Systems titlebar. and double-click Level 3 . the pipe is associated with that system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Warnings display. As you learned when placing components.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. thus assigning the components to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. double-click Level 1 . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. and click Show to view all of the system components. For example.rvt. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.HVAC Plan . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and for pipe sizing. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you assign components to a system. 6 In the Project Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. 7 In the System Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 In the System Browser.Design. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. In the System Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and click View. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.

Design floor plan. and click Expand All. click Close. and confirm unassigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 10 Using the same methods. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.HVAC Plan .TIP If you have multiple views open. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. otherwise. right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter THHN. select 75. ■ ■ For Factor. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Temperature Rating. speeding up the design phase. enter 1. You also add a wiring type. select Wiring Types. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select 90. For Temperature. wiring. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click (Open). 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Wiring . Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. As you place components and create circuits. In this exercise you review electrical settings. click Training Files. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select Copper. For Material.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material.Wire Sizes.04. Click OK. distribution systems. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. select Red. Click OK three times. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. for Custom Colors.

First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. power circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. 167 . Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . for the Spaces Category. select Average Estimated Illumination. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Click OK.rvt. Under Scheme Definition. By using orange as the color for this range. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. select the color legend. for Basic Colors. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the Color dialog. select the color for Less Than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. click (Open).00 fc. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Orange. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files.00 fc.

277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.7 In the Project Browser. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.5 fc range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The red field will clear once the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 8 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 13 Click the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range is satisfied. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 23 Click OK. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.

29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Click OK. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .277V. select Lighting Fixtures.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

The lighting delta is satisfied.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. 41 On the Options Bar. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. select Multiple Alignment. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the next exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt.

Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. 2 Tile the views as shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Color Fill plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

select Xenon and click OK. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Type Mark.00 VA. select Luminous Flux.277V and click OK. Under Identity Data. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select T5 [HO].00 lm. and click OK. select 463T5_S. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.ies and click Open. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter . ■ Click Apply. ■ Under Photometrics. for Apparent Load. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter 162. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.93. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. enter . Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Intensity. specify 15000. Click OK. In the Name dialog. for Lamp. ■ Click OK twice.85. enter F15. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.

and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. select Lighting Fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .Press Delete. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. you add switches.Press Delete.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and receptacles to your design. 2 In the drawing area. In the next exercise. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and Receptacles | 183 .

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. The element type Junction Boxes . Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad. Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches.

Click Edit Type. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 9’0”. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Number of Poles is 1. 15 Select the junction box. Click OK twice. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter JB-1NL. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 21 In the drawing area. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. Under Electrical. In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . NOTE When entering values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Level 2 .

NOTE If necessary. Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 23 In the System Browser.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. and Number of Elements. Select Load. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. Click OK. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Placing Switches. and Voltage. Distribution System. 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand General. and Receptacles | 187 . 26 In the System Browser. Select Size. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser.

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 .The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall.

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

equipment. click (Open). Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. click Training Files. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).rvt. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A. for Distribution System. 15 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . #1 Pole Breakers. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter PP-2B. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. 14 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. 8 Select the panelboard.

20 In the drawing area. which is the logical connection between the elements. For Panel Name. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Max. and for Category. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter LP-2B. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter 20. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. 23 In the Filter dialog.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 33 Select the switch on the right. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 41 In the Filter dialog. enter 2. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.Loads. click (Open). and for Category. Click OK. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Click OK. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click Check None. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Hot Conductors. except without wire.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 In the System Browser.rvt. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. Rating. Expand Electrical. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. Distribution System. Click OK. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. expand Power. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. and verify that Load. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. right-click on the Systems heading. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Close the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.

40 Click OK twice. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click Yes. Click OK. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. click Edit Type. 47 In the drawing area. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. enter FR4. click below the first one to place it. under Identity Data.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 35 Press ESC to end the command. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Tags. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. for Type Mark. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.

For Circuit Number. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and for Category.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and click Apply. select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 52 In the Save As dialog. Next you create a switch system. enter a comma. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Check None. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click Save. select Break. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.rfa. 56 In the Filter dialog. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Deselect Break and for Suffix.

Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. click (Open). Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. click Training Files. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical Lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. for Switch ID.rvt. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 2 In the drawing area.

under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. Click OK. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

click (Open). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 7 In space Electrical 220. Circuits are used for power. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. click Training Files. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select Electrical Fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel.rvt. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Loads | 207 . 4 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane. Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 19 Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.rfa. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.Loads. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and in the drawing area. select Wiring. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . and click Open. 13 Select the wire again. for Hot Conductors. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and click Element Properties. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. as shown. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Training Files. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. zoom to space Electrical 220. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Open. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 2 In the drawing area.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. select panel LP-2B.rvt. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

1-#10. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Rebalance Loads. for Rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . while Phase B provides 2004 VA.3616 VA). 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Click OK. Notice that the loads on Phase A. Scroll down. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. 1-#12. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Phase B 3636 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C . Under Electrical-Loads. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. B.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3712 VA. 6 Click OK. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. enter 30A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

for Rating. and click OK. click Training Files. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. Next you create a panel schedule. enter 30A. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Select PP-2B.Loads. Click OK. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. under Electrical . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. and click OK. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.15 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . under Electrical . enter 25A. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

7 Select the schedule. for Font Size. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.rvt. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font. enter 3/32. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. 11 Click OK twice. select Bold and Italic. Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Appearance. 4 Close the report. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Body Text. for Font Size. 5 In the Project Browser. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 1/8. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. click (Open). Under Header Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Training Files. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Sheets (all). drag PP-2B onto the sheet. select Berlin Sans FB. click Edit. and open E601 . under Other. 6 In the Project Browser.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Checking Your Design | 215 . In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Unassigned. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once.

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 18 Select panel LP-2C. select MDP-1. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click PVC . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and click OK.rvt. click Duplicate.Plumbing Plan . in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Properties. Adding a pipe size. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Vent. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and verify that Level 1 . type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In this exercise. In this lesson. 219 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 4 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

PVC . 26 Click OK. 17 In the left pane. enter -4' . Tap. PVC .DWV: Standard. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 18 For System Type. In the Project Browser. 13 In the right panel. select None. enter 5/8''.DWV: Standard. for Material. and click Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 22 Click New Size. select Plastic. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 27 For the new pipe size. click Training Files. 15 For System Type. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.Sch 40 . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.rfa.0''. and click OK. 6 Click OK. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings.Sch 40 .PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 21 In the right pane. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Sanitary. select Branch. For Offset. under Pipe Types. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .Sch 40 . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 1/2''. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Tee. Tee. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 10°.PVC . for Nominal. click Modify. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 On the Selection panel. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Tee Vent . 25 For Outside. Cross. under Mechanical. enter 27/32''. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Vent is listed. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.

including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. 221 . Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. vent.

You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including the men’s room (space Male 107). and verify that Level 1 . 1 urinal. as shown.rvt.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add 2 toilets. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. in the Type Selector.6 gpf. 4 On the Element panel. as shown. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. under Water Closet . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Wall Mounted.Flush Valve . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. select Public . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 1 wall-mounted urinal. and 3 sinks. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. against the left wall. 5 On the Placement panel.1.

under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again. use the reference line to center the fixture. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. and press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 12 On the Placement panel.2'' Drain. 14 Click Modify. under Floor Drain . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. In placing the fixture.

The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. a urinal.rvt. and review the components listed under this system. and click View ➤ Piping. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. In this exercise. and Default Domestic Cold Water. click Training Files. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. right-click in the System Browser table heading. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.

starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. and click OK.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 8 In the Filter dialog.

click Finish Editing System. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. If you deselected the drain. 12 On the Edit System panel. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. expand Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar. for System Name.

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

select Branch. You accept this suggested solution. for Solution Type.19 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. and click Settings. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Intersections. enter -1' 0''. click Solutions. The default settings are automatically modified. 23 For Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Slope. and click OK. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 24 In the left pane. for Diameter. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter -4'-0”. and for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Main. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select 4''.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

4 On the Element panel.rvt. under Lavatory .Rectangular.Public. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 On the Placement panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design is open. click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . select 22''x22'' .Design ➤ Floor Plans. in the Type Selector. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar.7 Click Modify. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. For example. enter 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 12 In the drawing area. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Add To System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

with the tee fitting selected. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 19 In the 3D view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 21 Select the tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 22 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Select the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views.

240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar.6''. enter 2' . for Offset. In this example. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click Apply. for Slope.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . under Wye 45 Deg Double . select Standard. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.PVC . 30 In the 3D view. click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV.Sch 40 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting.

33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. enter 1'. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add pipe segments to the double wye. for Offset. and press Enter. right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. zoom in to the double wye fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. enter 6''. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. 36 In the section view. double-click the section head to open the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. press Spacebar. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 6''. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view.

Sch 40 . 52 In the plan view. 56 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.DWV. select Standard. 53 Using the same method.PVC . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select the P-Trap on the left. 55 In the 3D view. under Trap P . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

58 Using the same method. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. In the plan view. and press Enter. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click in the plan view.. select the left P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Select the double wye pipe on the left. and click Draw Pipe. enter 6''. Click Modify.

■ In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. click Finish to select the recommended solution. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. In the Type Selector.

click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 62 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.

Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the top connector.Design. click Modify. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Sch 40 . 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Section view. select the vertical stack. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 5 Select the tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .DWV. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Standard.Plumbing Plan .PVC . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown. 10 In the 3D view. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Overall. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Floor level line. 7 On the Selection panel. and click the intersection to place the fitting.

under Plug .PVC . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 1'-0”. 13 Click the rotate control once. 18 In the plan view. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Select the fitting. for Offset. select Standard. 15 Press Esc. as shown. 17 In the Type Selector.11 Click Modify.Sch 40 . 14 On the Options Bar.DWV.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design ➤ Floor Plans.19 Click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . click Training Files. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. and sinks. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. select Domestic Hot Water. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. minimize the Sanitary system. urinal.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 14 In the System Browser.) 10 Click OK. 15 In the plan view. select Pipe Types: Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. under Design ➤ Plumbing . for System Type. if necessary. 4 In the right pane. 6 In the left pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. For Offset. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. draw a selection box to select the toilets. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 7 In the left pane. select Main. enter 9' 3''.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click OK.Overall. click Check None. double-click 3D Plumbing . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click Main. and for System Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. For Offset. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Branch. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Domestic Cold Water. 9 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that the value is 9' 0''. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. expand Unassigned.

23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. For Flow Conversion Method.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Finish Editing System. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Notice that the water main displays in blue. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. enter DCW 107. In the System Browser. 21 On the Edit System panel. 19 On the System Tools panel. click Edit System. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system.

35 In the Type Selector. enter 3' . 32 Move the cursor to the right. select the sink above the urinal. 30 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 37 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. click to the left of the urinal. and click Draw Pipe. enter 7''. and click the connector. 31 On the Options Bar. select 3/4''. for Offset. and press Enter. connect the second toilet. For Slope. enter 10'. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. right-click the top DCW connector. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. enter 0”/12”. 34 In the plan view. for Offset. 33 Click Modify. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 28 In the Type Selector. For Offset. and press Enter. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.2 7/8''. 36 Move the cursor to the left. as shown. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 4'0”. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click to place the pipe. select Water.25 Using the same method. as shown. under Pipe Types.

39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . expand the Unassigned folder. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 3 sinks. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Overall. 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.rvt.

You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. and click Edit System. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 15 In the System Browser. for System Name.Tankless. 14 Click Modify. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. you edit the system to add equipment. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. In later steps. 10 In the System Browser. select 0. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Domestic Cold Water. as shown. 13 In the plan view.6 Gallon. and click OK. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). in the Unassigned folder.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. When designing systems. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 12 In the Type Selector. under Water Heater . Default Domestic Hot Water. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

19 Select the water heater. Offset: 4' 6''. and press Enter. 22 In the Type Selector. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and on the Edit System panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. for Offset. enter 10’. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. as shown. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 24 Move the cursor up. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 27 Click Modify.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Slope: 0''/12''. select the water heater. enter 1' 6''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. click Finish Editing System. and click the water main line. and select Draw Pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 25 On the Options Bar.

35 On the Options Bar. as shown. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. enter 1''. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 33 On the Edit System panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and in the System Selector. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 0''. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. select 4'-6''. enter 1' 6''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 36 Move the cursor down. for Diameter. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and for Offset.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and press Enter. click Edit System. select a sink. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish Editing System. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe.

enter 1’. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. and press Enter. for Offset.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. and click Duplicate. However. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. You create a new pipe type.rvt.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click Standard. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. go to http://www.

8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 6 In the Project Browser. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Carbon Steel. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 9 Click OK. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. For Pipe Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. and click Properties. select Fire Protection Wet. Next. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. In the next exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. structural beams. under Mechanical. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. click Rename. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. verify that 9' 0" is selected. For System Type. and then click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. duct. select Main. for Material. For Offset.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you modify the type properties of the pipe. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. or architectural components. In the left pane. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

enter Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. under Fire Protection. and click Element Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Spaces. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Design is highlighted. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. click Add. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 1. select the upper half of the building. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Click OK twice.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 6 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . select Fire Protection. 8 Using a crossing window. For Group parameter under. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. and then click OK. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then access instance properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. enter Zone 2. and click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters.rvt. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection.

5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.Fire Protection Plan . 9 On the Formatting tab. enter 15. 14 Select the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click the Formatting tab. 10 In the Format dialog. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator. For Group parameter under. enter Light. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 7 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Fire Protection. click Add Parameter. select Feet and fractional inches. and click Field Format. In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Select Schedule keys. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible. For Type of Parameter. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. Click OK. select To the nearest 1'. 11 Click OK twice. select Length. enter Maximum Spacing.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Protection Area Construction Type. and on the ribbon. For Rounding. For Key name. The schedule displays. for Name.Design is highlighted. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Name. For Units. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Maximum Spacing. 6 Using the same method. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Spaces.

Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. based on the parameter settings you specified previously.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Ordinary. and press Enter. Click OK. select Spaces. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. under Available fields. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. For Name. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter 130. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

for Sort by. select Area. For Rounding. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Click OK. click Edit. For Type. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 22 Click OK twice. select 0 decimal place. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. and click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. click . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. select Level. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Common. select Number. For Formula. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). enter Minimum Sprinklers. Select Header and Blank line. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click View Properties. For Units. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Discipline. and click Field Format. In the Fields dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Sprinkler Zone.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Then by. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Fixed.

For Fields. For Then by (second instance). and then select Hidden field. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. right-click the schedule. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Under Field formatting. and then click Field Format. select Grand totals. At the bottom of the dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. 30 Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Hidden field. for Filter by. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Number. and click View Properties. click Edit. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter.

select Sprinklers. delete the word Maximum. and Count. click Edit. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. System Name. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Count. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Calculate totals. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Embedded Schedule. for Available fields. select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. double-click Type. under Other. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and select Totals only. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab.

51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Ordinary. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and the spacing parameter values are evident. 48 In the floor plan.Fire Protection Plan Design.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and access the instance properties. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. double-click FP . 52 Click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Light. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. As a result. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. but their values are not determined. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction. 50 Access the instance properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data. 44 In the schedule. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Click Cancel. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

click Training Files. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and double-click Level 2 . go to http://www. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. However. At the end of this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.rvt. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 . If the tutorial training files are not present. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. methodology.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you will understand the process. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.

3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. while pressing Ctrl. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler .7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 9 In space Instruction 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. as shown. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Pendent . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Next. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Also. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.

enter 11. 29 Press Esc. This number is determined in the schedule. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Notice that the schedule updates. 17 In the Project Browser.Design. move the cursor to the right. 18 Type WT.FP_Ceiling view. open Design ➤ FP . 19 In the floor plan. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 200B. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . Next. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you adjust the offset. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. you place non-hosted sprinklers. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. enter 10' 6". and 200C). 23 Right-click the sprinkler. enter 14' 6". specify a vertical offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. For Number. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and press Enter.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. under Constraints. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and with piping (physical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. In the next exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.rvt. click Training Files.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.Fire Protection Plan . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. However. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.

It does not indicate a pipe layout path. In the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. and select Piping. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. within the Piping Systems folder. named Fire Protection Wet.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. as shown. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 5 Right-click the header. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Piping System | 285 .

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. In the left pane. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. indicating the logical connection. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. for System Name. For Offset. system equipment. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The Edit Piping System panel displays. providing system editing tools. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the system. 19 Click OK. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and select the system. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. press Tab. Next. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. For Pipe Type. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.Wet is selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and click Select. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 12 On the Options Bar. click Settings. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. and a piping layout preview displays. select Branch. 11 With the system still selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 In the drawing area.

23 For Offset. 22 On the Options Bar.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and green represents branch lines). verify that Network is selected. When the layout is finished. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Place Base. as shown. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. enter -12' 0". Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). select 2". (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. for Diameter. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. A (parallel movement control) displays. 29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and various manual pipe creation tools.

1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Fire Protection Plan . 3 If necessary.Design is highlighted.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 8 In the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. mechanical equipment. for Solution Type. radiators. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). verify that Network is selected. and pipe or duct is created. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 14 Close the System Browser. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. or a system component to display system tools. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Solutions is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. you can select the pipe or duct. click Add To System. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit System panel. air terminals.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Layout. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).

Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. for Offset. and then tile the views. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 23 View the result in the 3D view.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. select 9'. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then press Esc. right-click.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights.

click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. ■ 6 Press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar.

for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. For additional practice. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You added tags to pipes. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet fire protection system.

create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

and apply a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. dependent views. matchlines. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. right-click Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. 307 . You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and view references. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. right-click Copy of Level 1. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.

click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the drawing area. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. more focused. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. views and put them on the sheet. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.rvt. as shown. create dependent views for areas B and C. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Using the same method. click Training Files. and click OK. and then press Esc. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Rename. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template.

21 Using the same method. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select black. In the Color dialog. For Line Weight. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. on the Options Bar. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select Double Dash 5/8". and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Pattern. click the current value. for Target view./ ---). select 11. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 27 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

right-click Plumbing Isometric . and select the section box. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. for View Name. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click Properties. 2 Zoom in. Under Graphics. enter Plumbing Isometric . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and click to select it.Domestic Water. select Plumbing Isometric. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .Domestic Water. For Sub-Discipline. For Default View Template. for View Classification. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template. select Documentation.

Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. press Tab 3 times. select 3. and click to select it. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. For Pattern. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water view with detailing. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. On the View Control Bar. In the drawing area. 18 Using methods learned previously. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and click to select it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

as shown. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. In the Format dialog. for Rounding. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 21 Click OK twice. click on the Format value. select To the nearest 1/8". verify that Common is selected. When the view is associated with a sheet. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 25 Press Esc twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. For Slope. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. for Scale.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. click Training Files. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). indicating that it’s the active view. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. double-click M601 . Click OK. for Line Weight. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). using the same method.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Title on Sheet. For Default View Template. Click OK. right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

25 In the Project Browser. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. right-click the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Names. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

you learn how to: ■ add text notes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. duct tags. ■ work with model-based components.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. click Training Files.rvt. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Creating Annotations In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.9 Press Esc twice. a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 .

24 On the Options Bar. click Load. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 21 In the Load Family dialog. for Ducts.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 22 In the Tags dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. If necessary. under Category.rfa. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 20 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click OK. and click Open. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.

27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. and then press Esc. as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Leader.25 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. 26 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Creating Annotations | 325 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader. as shown.33 On the Options Bar.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and lock lighting fixtures. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions In this exercise. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. That’s because you changed a type property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not simply an instance property.36 Press Esc twice. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. lay out. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and all elements of that type are affected. 40 Using the method learned previously. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select the last tag placed.

5 Click to create a permanent dimension. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then select the interior face of the wall. 12 Press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.rvt. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files.

Because the dimensions are locked. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.3 1/2"). add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Creating a Legend | 329 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. annotation symbols.13 Using the same method. 19 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and press Enter. enter 8'. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. linework. and offset them 8' from the wall. 16 Press Esc. and notes.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. select Floor Plan. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Using the same method.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select 1/4" = 1' -0". Click OK. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area. For Scale.8 Neck. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.rvt. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. enter Diffuser Legend. click Training Files. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. For View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . The selected detail lines are now thin. 24 Select the component’s break line. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 21 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl.RISE symbol for the copy start point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP and its text note. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. enter E. Creating a Legend | 333 . 34 Using the method learned previously. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. and text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 335 . A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser . 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Next. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 8 Using the same method. and click to place it. and then modify and align the views. clear Leader. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 5 In the drawing area.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. and click Activate View. select the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. for Title on Sheet. and click OK. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. 13 Right-click. giving the appearance of a single view.

You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. you add wiring to the diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. 22 Press Esc. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 21 Using the drag control. and click Activate View. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.

verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Lines. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the Line Styles dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. As you draw. and click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. for Name. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. as shown. click New. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. and then click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the New Subcategory dialog.rvt.113 North view. for Line Weight. click Training Files. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Under Modify Subcategories. notice that there are no snaps active. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Electrical Power. select 6.

for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 11 Using the same method. as shown.10 Press Esc. enter 1/8". 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 28 Click above the cap. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).

33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.

enter 0 0. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and then press Esc. for Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 3/32".36 Press Esc.5. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

25. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. for Name. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Press Esc.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 47 In the drawing area. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 With the group selected. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Using the same method. and click OK. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.125. click on the length dimension value. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter Ground. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then press Esc. select all 3 lines. while pressing Ctrl. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. enter 0 0.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.51 Using the method learned previously. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

2 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click OK. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. 5 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.rvt. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and will place it on sheet E01. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.

6 Select the section box. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. and Left sides converge. and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then press Esc.

9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Under Names. Walkthroughs. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D Views. and click Apply View Template.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D HVAC Iso. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Typical. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method.

under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. and then click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and under Extents.

Click OK. select 3" = 1'-0". 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . right-click the view name. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 3 In the Project Browser. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place a detail component.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. For Scale. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. select the isometric view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).29 In the drawing area. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.

354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Documentation. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Sub-Discipline. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. 9 Zoom in to the component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For View Classification. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. Click OK. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 12 On the Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. as shown.

I. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 20 Select 1. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. for Type. select C. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .P. and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 18 With the filled region still selected. (Line). 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. select Multiple. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.28 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Press Esc. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 40 Click Finish Region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. as shown. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 52 In the Create Group dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain. 49 Click Modify. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and then click to select them.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.D. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. for Name. as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown.

61 Using the same method. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.62 Press Esc twice. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and then click OK. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and use the grips to resize the masking region.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. as shown. 67 On the Options Bar. 71 Click Modify. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 80 Press Esc twice. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 81 Select the text note. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 . select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 .

■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Black and White. Click Open. For A-----NPP. Click OK.dwg. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Visible. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. For Import units. you import a CAD detail drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. for Line Weight. click Training Files. For Layers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Auto-Detect. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Colors. select 3.

select the viewport title. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful